2017 promaster
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
17VF-126-AE
promaster
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ......................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ......................................57
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...........................................101
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................179
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES ......................................................249
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE.......................................................285
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .........................................................333
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE .................................................339
10
INDEX..........................................................................347
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
4 INTRODUCTION
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S.
residents refer to the Warranty Information book, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Cov-
ered” section of the Warranty Information book. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves,
refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on
these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed
by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be
supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are miss-
ing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable
manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimen-
sional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is
intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical sup-
port. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Informa-
tion Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle,
the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ...............11
▫ Mechanical Ignition Key Removal ............11
▫ Locking Doors With A Key ................12
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder .................12
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................13
▫ Replacement Keys .......................13
▫ General Information .....................14
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .14
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................14
▫ To Arm The System ......................14
▫ To Disarm The System ....................14
▫ Security System Manual Override ............15
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ....................15
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) .............15
▫ To Unlock The Doors .....................16
▫ To Lock The Doors.......................16
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........16
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement ..............16
▫ General Information .....................17
䡵 POWER DOOR LOCKS ....................17
▫ Automatic Door Locks ...................19
▫ Auto Unlock Doors ......................19
䡵 WINDOWS .............................19
▫ Power Windows ........................19
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................20
2
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........20
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........20
▫ Important Safety Precautions ...............21
▫ Seat Belt Systems .......................22
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .........32
▫ Child Restraints ........................45
▫ Transporting Pets .......................51
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .....52
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................52
▫ Transporting Passengers ...................52
▫ Exhaust Gas ...........................53
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ...........................53
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .....................56
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains an integrated mechanical key. To use
the mechanical key, simply push the mechanical key re-
lease button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the authorized
dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code
numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be
used to order duplicate keys.
Mechanical Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the mechanical ignition switch.
Key Fob With Integrated Mechanical Key
Mechanical Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door,
turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn the key
to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
signal to remove the key.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized ve-
hicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition
switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is turned to
the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a problem
with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a
Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle. When having the Sentry
Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys
with you to an authorized dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the vehicle
security alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks
are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible
signals. For the first three minutes, the horn will sound,
and the turn signal lights will flash. For an additional 15
minutes, only the turn signal lights will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If the system has not been disabled, the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of
turn lamps flashing. If the condition which initiated the
alarm is still present, the system will ignore that condition
and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
To Arm The System
To arm the system, the vehicle security alarm will set when
you use the key fob to lock the doors. If a door or the hood
is not properly shut, the alarm system will not be armed.
To Disarm The System
Use the key fob to unlock the door and disarm the system.
The vehicle security alarm will also disarm if a pro-
grammed Sentry Key is inserted into the ignition switch. To
exit the alarming mode, push the key fob unlock button, or
insert a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition switch.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
or manually from the driver door cylinder to unlock the
doors or open any door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position.
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-
held key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on key fob once to
unlock only the front doors. Push and release the cargo
unlock button on key fob once to unlock the cargo area
(rear lateral sliding doors and rear door). The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
signal; the horn will chirp too during turn signal lights
flashing.
If a door is open, the turn signal lights will flash at an
increased rate, and there will be no horn chirp. This is to
indicate that a door is still open.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in this section for further informa-
tion.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the
mechanical key to access the battery case screw located
on the side of the key fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key fob using
a small screwdriver.
Key Fob Screw Location
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The central lock/unlock button has an LED that indicates
whether the doors are locked or unlocked.
• LED ON: Doors locked. Push the central lock/unlock
button once again to centrally unlock all doors. The LED
will switch off.
• LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Push the central lock/unlock
button again to centrally lock all doors. The doors will be
locked only if all the doors are properly closed.
Once the doors have been locked with the key fob, it will
no longer be possible to unlock them by pushing the
central lock/unlock button.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to
the detent.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
The load compartment power door lock switch is located
on the driver door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or
unlock the load compartment doors.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Load Compartment Power Door Lock Switch
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Automatic Door Locks
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled through the
instrument cluster display or the Uconnect system.
Auto Unlock Doors
This feature unlocks all doors when the driver door is
open.
NOTE: If the passenger door is open, only the passenger
door is unlocked. This procedure is the same for the rear
and side doors as well.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door panel has up-down
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Auto-Down Feature
The window switches are equipped with an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch for a short period of time,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the Auto-Down motion part way, pull up/push
down on the window switch briefly.
NOTE: The power window switches remain active for up
to three minutes (depending on the accessory delay set-
ting) after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Open-
ing either of the vehicle’s front doors will cancel this
feature.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs open the front windows together to minimize the
buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer ser-
vice contact information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat-
ing BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Adjustable Anchorage
Adjustable Anchorage
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is equipped
with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunc-
tion in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
3 — Driver/Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The driver and passenger front air bag system is designed
to inflate based on the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropri-
ate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side
impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle
during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protec-
tion. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy indepen-
dently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only
and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Fuel Cut Off Switch
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fuel Cut Off safety switch.
In the event of an accident, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Fuel Cut Off Switch may
perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine and turn off the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from
the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the Fuel
Cut Off Switch by following the procedure described
below.
Fuel Cut Off Switch Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch after an event
push the “A” Button located underneath the front passen-
ger seat knee impact bolster.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If, after an accident, you smell fuel or see leaks from
the fuel system, do not reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch to
avoid the risk of fire. Before resetting the Fuel Cut Off
Switch, carefully check for fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights).
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
Fuel Cut Off Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-
point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their forward-
facing child restraint, but are too small to
properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Vehicles
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a family
vehicle and is not intended for carrying children in the
front passenger seat(s). Never install rear-facing child
restraints in this vehicle. Although the seat belt can be
locked to secure a child restraint, there are no tether
anchorages to complete the proper installation of a
forward-facing child restraint. If you must carry a child in
a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger seat should
be moved to the full rearward position and the child must
be in a proper restraint system based on its age, size and
weight. Follow the instructions below to secure the child
restraint using the seat belt.
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be secured in
the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger air bag.
In a collision, a passenger air bag may deploy causing
severe injury or death to infants riding in rear-facing
infant restraints.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems”
for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................60
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......60
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................60
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ............60
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..............61
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............61
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped.........62
䡵 SEATS ................................64
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments..............64
▫ Suspension Seat — If Equipped .............67
▫ Swivel Seat — If Equipped ................68
▫ Flap On Bench — If Equipped ..............69
▫ Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) —
If Equipped............................70
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ...............71
▫ Head Restraints ........................72
▫ Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped ..........73
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ...........74
䡵 LIGHTS ...............................76
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................76
▫ Headlights ............................77
▫ Dimmer Controls .......................77
▫ Ambient Light..........................77
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .......78
▫ Battery Saver...........................78
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .................78
▫ Turn Signals ...........................78
▫ Parking Lights .........................79
3
▫ Lane Change Assist ......................79
▫ High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........79
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................79
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay ...........79
▫ Overhead Lights ........................80
▫ Ambient Light..........................81
▫ Cargo Lamp ...........................81
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........82
▫ Windshield Wipers ......................82
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .................82
▫ Low Speed ............................82
▫ High Speed ............................82
▫ Mist Feature ...........................82
▫ Windshield Washer Operation...............83
䡵 TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ..........83
䡵 SPEED CONTROL ........................84
▫ To Activate ............................85
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ...................85
▫ To Deactivate ..........................85
▫ To Resume Speed .......................85
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .................86
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................87
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................87
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors ...........88
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts ............89
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications . . .90
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System ...............................90
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions ............................90
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................92
䡵 OVERHEAD SHELF— IF EQUIPPED ..........94
䡵 POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED ...........94
58 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED .......96
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ..........................97
䡵 STORAGE ..............................97
▫ Glove Compartments ....................97
▫ Front Door Storage — If Equipped ...........98
▫ Dash Storage ..........................98
▫ Dashboard Clipboard .....................99
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ..................99
▫ CargoArea ...........................99
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 59
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical
adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to center on the
view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Manual Rearview Mirror
60 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the left
upper, left lower, right upper or right lower mirror posi-
tions indicated by one of the four arrow’s on the switch.
Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror
to move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn
the control to the center position “O” to prevent acciden-
tally moving a mirror.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a power blind spot
mirror, you can adjust them when the control wand is
positioned to the lower arrows.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster button located in the temperature con-
trols. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 61
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located on the
driver’s door panel below the power mirror controls.
Push the switch to the right and the mirrors will fold in,
push the switch to the left and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch Location
Power Folding Mirror Switch
1 — Power Folding Mirror (Normal Driving Position)
2 — Power Folding Mirror (Fold In Position)
62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power fold mirrors are designed to be folded and
unfolded using the power folding switch. If the mirrors are
manually folded, the mirror head may appear loose.
If the mirror head or pivot exhibits a slight amount of play,
the mirror should be power folded closed, then power
folded open (this may require multiple button pushes).
NOTE: The intended use of the power fold mirrors is by
pushing the buttons to fold and unfold the mirrors. Only
manually fold the mirrors when necessary.
Forward Folding
Mirrors can be folded forward manually or by accidental
impact. In this case it is possible to restore to position both
ways, manually and electrically (as described above).
CAUTION!
Leaving the mirror in a non powered position, acciden-
tal impact or manual fold, may cause permanent dam-
age to the mirror. Electrically restore the mirror to its
normal position, as soon as practical.
Power/Manual Folding Mirror Positions
1 — Normal Driving Position
2 — Fold In Position
3 — Fold Forward Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
The driver and passenger seats can be adjusted forward/
rearward and reclined. Also, if equipped, front and rear
height and lumbar adjustment.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount
of lumbar support. The lumbar control knob is located on
the rear upper outboard side of the driver’s seatback.
Rotate the control forward to increase and rearward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Height Adjustment (Without Swivel Seat) — If Equipped
The height adjusting levers are located on the center
outboard side of the seat. Lift up on the front lever to adjust
the front of the seat up or down. Lift up on the rear lever
to adjust the rear of the seat up or down.
Driver’s Seat
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjusting Bar
2 — Lumbar Knob
Height Adjustment Levers
1 — Front Height Adjusting Lever
2 — Rear Height Adjusting Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65
Height Adjustment (With Swivel Seat) — If Equipped
The height adjusting knobs are located on the center
outboard side of the seat. Rotate the front knob to adjust
the front of the seat up or down. Rotate the rear knob to
adjust the rear of the seat up or down.
Recliner Adjustment — Without Swivel Seat
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, rotate the knob rearward to
position the seatback as desired. To return the seatback to
its normal upright position, lean forward, rotate the knob
forward until the seatback is in the upright position.
Height Adjustment Knobs
1 — Front Height Adjusting Knob
2 — Rear Height Adjusting Knob
Recliner Knob
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment — With Swivel Seat
The recliner lever is located at the lower front outboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lean forward
slightly, pull the lever outward, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward and pull the lever
outward. Release the lever once the seatback is in the
upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Suspension Seat — If Equipped
The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring system and
hydraulic shock absorber to ensure maximum comfort and
safety. The system of springs also effectively absorbs im-
pact from uneven road surfaces.
Recliner Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67
Damper Weight Adjustment
Use the weight adjustment knob to set the required setting
based on body weight, with settings between 88 lbs (40 kg)
and 286 lbs (130 kg).
Swivel Seat — If Equipped
The swivel seat lever is located at the lower front inboard
side of the seat. The seat may be turned through 180°
toward the seat on the opposite side and approximately 35°
toward the door. The seat may be locked in the driving
position or at the 180° position. To swivel the seat, pull the
swivel seat inboard lever outward, turn the seat to the
desired position and release the lever.
If the vehicle is equipped with interlocking swivel seats,
the seats must be locked in facing forward position while
driving. If the seats are not in the correct position, a
warning will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Weight Adjustment Knob
Swivel Seat Lever
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked in facing
forward position before the first vehicle movement, shift-
ing out of park is not allowed until the seats are both
locked in facing forward position. When the seats are not in
the right position and the first vehicle movement after the
cranking is attempted, a chime and a text message will
appear in instrument cluster display. Rotate and lock the
swivel seats in the correct position before trying again.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked in facing
forward position during movement of the vehicle, a mes-
sage will appear in the instrument cluster display and an
intermittent chime will sound until key-off or until the
swivel seats are locked in facing forward position. Stop and
move the swivel seats in the correct position before pro-
ceeding.
If a fault is present in the system and it is not possible to
check the correct position of the swivel seats, a message
and the generic warning light appears in the instrument
cluster display to inform about the failure. In these condi-
tions, check the status of the swivel seats and not drive the
vehicle until the swivel seats are locked in facing forward
position.
Flap On Bench — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a bench seat, the seat is
equipped with a fold-down flap that can be used as a
document support surface. To use the fold-down flap,
grasp the pull tab and lower the flap.
Fold-Down Flap Pull Tab
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69
The fold-down flap is equipped with two cup holders and
a support surface with a paper holder clip.
Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) —
If Equipped
A storage tray is located under the driver’s seat that can be
easily removed by withdrawing the hooks on the support
base.
Fold-Down Flap
Underseat Storage Tray
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the lower outboard side of the seat.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. Push the
switch a second time to shut the heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Heated Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go.
Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped
The seat adjustable armrest can be raised and adjusted for
height. Underneath the front of the armrest is the adjuster
wheel which will adjust the height of the armrest up or
down.
Adjuster Wheel Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
Turn the adjuster wheel to the right or left to adjust the
height of the armrest up or down.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Open the driver’s door to gain access to the hood release
lever. Pull the hood release lever located on the side of
the instrument panel.
Adjuster Wheel
Hood Release
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into the
opening beneath the center of the hood and push the
safety latch lever to the right to release it, before raising
the hood.
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in hood slot
to secure the hood in the open position.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
Hood Prop Rod Slot
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod is
fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm down-
ward push at the center front edge of the hood to
ensure that both latches engage. Never drive your
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection and the passing lights. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light, the clearance
lights and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To
turn off the headlights, turn the end of the multifunction
lever back to the O (Off) position.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are located on the left side of the
instrument panel below the instrument cluster display.
Pushing the up or down arrow will increase or decrease the
brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Ambient Light
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the dome
lamp, the ambient light will be on all the time with the
option of dimming it with the dimmer controls.
Dimmer Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O (Off) position.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL. The DRL function may be programmed to be on
or off through the Uconnect system screen if equipped, or
through the instrument cluster display menu. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” or “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the
ignition is ON, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is off, and the turn signal is off.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery when the
ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 15 minutes the
interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack
of the instrument panel, just below the climate
controls. Push the switch once to turn the fog
lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn the fog
lights off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
tive.
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights
These lights can only be turned on with ignition key in the
STOP position or removed, by moving the end of the
multifunction lever to O (off) position and then to the
headlight position.
The warning light telltale in the instrument panel comes
on. The lights stay on until the next ignition cycle is
performed.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five
times then automatically turn off.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the lever a second time to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn
on until the lever is released.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever is
pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a
maximum of 210 seconds.
The warning light on the instrument panel will light up
and the corresponding message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display for as long as the function is activated.
The warning light comes on when the lever is operated and
stays on until the function is automatically deactivated.
Each movement of the lever only increases the amount of
time the lights stay on.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and
hold it for more than two seconds.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
Overhead Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead shelf. Each light is turned on by pushing the
corresponding switch.
Dome Lights
The interior lights can be set to three different positions
(Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position).
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console:
• Push the switch to the on/right position from its center
position and the lights are always on.
• Push the switch to the off/left position from its center
position and the lights are always off.
• Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights are
turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed.
Map Lights
The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead
console controls the map or reading function of the lights.
Push the switch on the right position to turn the right light
on, push again to turn the right light off. Push the switch
on the left position to turn the left light on, also push again
to turn the left light off.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch
is in the center position or that the lights are off to
avoid draining the battery.
Overhead Lights
1 — Ambient Light
2 — Right Map Light
3 — On/Right Position
4 — Center Position
5 — Off/Left Position
6 — Left Map Light
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the dome
lamp, the ambient light will be on all the time with the
option of dimming it with the dimmer controls.
Cargo Lamp
The Rear Cargo Lamp is located at the upper rear cargo
area above the rear doors.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Side Cargo Lamp
located at the upper rear area of the passenger side sliding
door opening.
The Cargo Lamps can be set to three different positions
(Off/Right Position, Center Position, On/Left Position).
• Push the Cargo Lamp lens to the right from its center
position and the lamp is always off.
• Leave the Cargo Lamp lens in the center position, and
the lamp is turned on and off when the sliding doors or
rear doors are opened or closed.
• Push the Cargo Lamp lens to the left from its center
position and the lamp is always on.
Rear Cargo Lamp
Side Cargo Lamp
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right
side of the steering column. There are five different modes
of operation for the front windshield wipers. The wind-
shield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access the
modes.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Intermittent Wiper System
Push the lever downward to the first detent and rotate the
center ring to use one of the four intermittent wiper
settings when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles, desirable.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers
will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Mist Feature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occa-
sional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever up-
ward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping
cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer lever
toward the steering wheel to activate the washers. The
wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the
lever is released. and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for three cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering
column. The telescoping control handle is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle up.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle down until fully engaged.
Telescoping Control Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h) up to
the maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).
The Speed Control Lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
rotating the Speed Control ON/OFF center ring and reset-
ting the desired vehicle set speed.
Speed Control Lever
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
Rotate the center ring upward on the Speed Control lever
to turn the system on. The Cruise Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, rotate the center ring upward a second time.
The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should
be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, move the Speed Control lever upward
SET(+) and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before moving the Speed Control lever
upward SET(+).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the RES button, or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Speed Control without erasing the set speed
memory. Rotating the center ring upward to turn the
system off or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph
(160 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
tapping the Speed Control lever up (+).
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
radio settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more informa-
tion. The speed increment shown is dependant on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever up (+) once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the lever results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the lever is continually held up, the set speed will
continue to increase until the lever is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever up (+) once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the lever results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the lever is continually held up, the set speed will
continue to increase until the lever is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
tapping the Speed Control lever down (-).
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
radio settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more informa-
tion. The speed increment shown is dependant on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-) once will
result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the lever is continually held down, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the lever is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-) once will
result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the lever is continually held down, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the lever is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides an au-
dible indication of the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and rec-
ommendations.
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist is automatically activated
when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the
distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the
audible alert becomes more frequent.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated
when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can
detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) from the
center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60
cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds
to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the
underside of the vehicle during the parking maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Sensors Location
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is
engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the distance
from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession
indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous
tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 inches
(30 cm) away.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle
Distance
An obstacle is
present within
the sensors’ field
of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level programmable through personal settings in the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Failure Sensor or System
failures
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on multifunction display (where provided).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance
increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance
measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition
occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after
three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers par-
allel to walls).
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications
A malfunction of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors or
system is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by
the instrument panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message is
displayed on the multifunction display (if
equipped). Refer to “Warning And Indicator
Lights” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicated
immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display shall
indicate that the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is
unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure
condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire system
must be disabled. The system is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
Clean the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping
the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4
inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The Rear Park Assist system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could pro-
vide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE and/or when the rear doors
are opened. The image will be displayed on the touch-
screen display along with a caution note to “check entire
surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView Rear Back
Up Camera is located on the top rear of the vehicle below
the center light.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE and/or when
the rear doors are closed, the rear camera mode is exited
and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of
the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Back Up Camera Location
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
NOTE: ParkView Rear Back Up Camera can be enabled or
disabled by Uconnect system menu.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
OVERHEAD SHELF— IF EQUIPPED
The overhead shelf is located on the headliner above the
review mirror. The overhead console contains the follow-
ing features:
• Automatic Dome Lights
• Dome Lights
• Map Lights
• Ambient Light
NOTE: For additional information on the light function,
refer to “Lights” in this chapter for further information.
POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
The cigar lighter and the power outlet are located in the
center console. It only operates with the ignition key at
MAR/ON.
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
‘Load Compartment Power Outlet
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on the left
rear side of the rear cargo compartment. The outlet can be
is used for powering 12 Volt adaptive accessories and
recharging communications devices.
NOTE: Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
Load Compartment Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F14 Fuse 20 A Yellow Front Power Outlet
2 — F09 Fuse 15 A Blue Rear Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with two auxiliary switches
located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering
column which can be used to power various electronic
devices. Connections to the switches are found in the right
central pillar fuse panel at the base of the passenger side B
pillar.
Auxiliary Switch 1 is configured to constant battery feed,
while Auxiliary Switch 2 is configured to ignition feed.
Auxiliary Upfitter Switches
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For further information on using the auxiliary switches,
please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate
links.
CUPHOLDERS
The cupholders for the driver’s and passenger’s area are
located near the floor just under the center stack storage
compartment. There are cupholders located in each door
panel as well as one single cupholder located to the right of
the manual climate controls.
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
Cupholders
Glove Compartments
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders are located in both the
front door trim panels.
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Front Door Storage Dash Storage
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dashboard Clipboard
Located on top of the dashboard is a clipboard and two
storage bins on each side of the clipboard.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area
The cargo area may be equipped with different options
such as a optional side panels, rear seats and an optional
floor.
Clipboard And Storage Bins
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ...........103
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................104
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ........106
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ...............107
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights .............114
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights..............123
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights ...............125
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........125
▫ Instrument Cluster Display And Controls ......126
▫ Setup Menu...........................127
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System .........129
▫ Trip Computer ........................129
▫ Trip Button ...........................129
▫ Trip Functions ........................130
▫ Values Displayed .......................131
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) .........131
䡵 CYBERSECURITY ........................132
䡵 UCONNECT RH3 ........................134
▫ Introduction ..........................134
▫ Recommendations ......................134
▫ Identification Number ...................135
▫ Security Code .........................135
▫ General ..............................136
▫ Uconnect RH3 Display ...................137
▫ General Functions And Settings .............137
▫ Tuner Mode (AM/FM Radio) ..............139
▫ Setup
Menu...........................141
4
▫ Clock ...............................142
▫ USB Mode (MP3/WMA/AAC) ............143
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ....................149
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................149
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate .................150
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen ...............150
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
5.0 Settings ...........................151
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . . .161
▫ USB Charging Port ......................161
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......162
▫ Radio Operation........................162
䡵 CD DISC MAINTENANCE .................162
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .163
▫ General Information ....................163
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ....................164
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview...........164
▫ Operating Tips ........................169
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION .........172
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................172
▫ Get Started ...........................172
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................174
▫ Radio ...............................175
▫ Media ...............................175
▫ Phone ...............................176
▫ Voice Text Reply .......................177
▫ General Information .....................178
▫ Additional
Information ...................178
102 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
Instrument Panel Features Will Vary As Equipped
1 — Air Outlet 10 — Lower Glove Compartment 19 — Uconnect Phone Buttons
2 — Multifunction Lever (External Lights) 11 — Cup Holder 20 — Tilt Steering Column Release Lever
3 — Instrument Cluster 12 — USB Charger/12V 21 — Horn
4 — Multifunction Lever
(Front Wiper, Trip Computer)
13 — Climate Controls 22 — Mute/Uconnect Voice Command
Buttons
5 — Radio (As Equipped) 14 — Lower Switch Bank 23 — Cruise Control Switches
6 — Clip Board 15 — Cup Holders 24 — Fuse Box Lid
7 — Upper Glove Compartment 16 — Gear Selector 25 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
8 — Passenger Air Bag 17 — USB / AUX 26 — Hood Release
9 — Storage Compartment 18 — Ignition Switch
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows instrument cluster display messages. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Area
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
104 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If
your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the
repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is
a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer
reading before the repair/service, so that you can be
sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb
sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
• Gear Selector Status (PRND)
The gear selector status “P,R,N,D,1,2,3,4,5,6” are dis-
played indicating the gear selector position. Telltales
“1,2,3,4,5,6” indicate the manual mode has been en-
gaged and the gear selected is displayed. Refer to
“Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information on ERS.
3. Tachometer
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
4. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
106 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine
is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Door Open Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will also be a single chime.
108 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending
on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and a
buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. This light indicates that the transmission fluid tempera-
ture is running hot. This may occur with severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or
apply light foot pressure to increase the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature
light turns off. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
110 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙ a Red Dot lamp located to the left of the “H”
will illuminate and a single chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature
gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙ In this case, a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool
or the 4 minute duration is expired, whichever comes first.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS
pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each
stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
112 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate if one or more of the stop light bulb fails.
The failure relating to this light could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
114 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
External Light Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
External Light Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will come on when a failure to one of the following lights is
detected:
• Direction Indicators
• Backup Lights
• Parking Lights
• Daytime Running Lights
• Clearance Lights
• License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
If during starting, the key code is not correctly recognized, the vehicle security light comes on in
the instrument panel. In this case, turn the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is still locked,
try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer if you still
cannot start the engine.
If with the engine running, the warning light comes on, this means that the system is running a
self-test (for example for a voltage drop).
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
116 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immedi-
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
118 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come
on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON even
if it was manually turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds and flash the ESC activation light
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following
the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Generic Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Generic Warning Indicator Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Oil Change
Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Not Available,
Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure.
122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Instrument Cluster Display And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
instrument panel.
The menu items consists of the following:
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Date
• Autoclose
• Units
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer (Just Available After SBR Disable Made
By CHR Service)
• Service (Diesel Only)
• DRL - Daytime Running Light (If Equipped)
• Exit Menu
Instrument Cluster Display
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column:
• MODE Button
Push and hold the MODE button for a time longer than
one second to access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the
MODE button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus
or adjust the illumination on the instrument
panel when the headlights are on.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and sub-
menus or adjust the illumination on the instru-
ment panel when the headlights are on.
Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Push and release the up or down arrow button to
access the different options and settings (setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MODE
button. Single pushes on the up or down arrow button will
scroll through the setup menu options. The menu items
include the following functions:
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
Display Control Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
• Set Data
• Autoclose
• Units (Distance, Fuel Economy, Temperature)
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer (Just Available After SBR Disable Made
By CHR Service)
• Service (Diesel Only)
• DRL - Daytime Running Lights (If Equipped)
• Exit menu
NOTE:
• If equipped with Uconnect radio, some customer pro-
grammable features will display in the Uconnect sys-
tem. Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment for further information.
• The clock setting and Uconnect clock setting procedure
can be done through the radio or the instrument cluster
display.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MODE button to select the
main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MODE button to store the
new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MODE button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options.
3. Briefly push and release the MODE button to select the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant
setup menu.
4. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this submenu
option.
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Briefly push and release the MODE button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and release and hold the MODE button to return
to the main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer
hold).
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
display in the instrument cluster display. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means
the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
MODE button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times,
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays information
such as trip information, range, fuel consumption, average
speed, and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 kilometers
(621370 miles) or when the “Travel time” reaches 99.59
(99 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset automati-
cally.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the sys-
tem.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the
screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the information
associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
over two seconds to reset trip information.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have been
displayed or hold the MODE button for longer than one
second.
Briefly push and release the MODE button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MODE (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip Distance A
• Average Fuel Consumption
• Average Speed A
• Travel Time A (Driving Time)
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip Distance B
• Average Fuel Consumption
• Average Speed B
• Travel Time B (Driving Time)
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Current Trip” can be used to display the figures relating
to:
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Fuel Consumption”
cannot be reset.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving condi-
tions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the
display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire
pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the
above notes.
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy
This value shows the approximate average fuel consump-
tion since the last reset.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a function
of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Data
• Autoclose
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
• Units (Distance, Fuel Economy, Temperature)
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer (Just Available After SBR Disable Made
By CHR Service)
• Service (Diesel Only)
• DRL - Daytime Running Light (If Equipped)
• Exit menu
NOTE:
• If equipped with Uconnect radio, some customer pro-
grammable features will display in the Uconnect sys-
tem. Refer to the Uconnect Settings for further
Uconnect 5.0/5.0N information.
• The instrument cluster display clock setting and
Uconnect clock setting procedure can be done through
the radio or the instrument cluster display.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
UCONNECT RH3
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with a radio that has an AM/FM
radio receiver and a USB port for playing MP3, WMA and
AAC files. The device has been designed according to the
specific characteristics of the vehicle, with a design match-
ing the style of the instrument panel.
The radio is installed in an ergonomic position for the
driver and passenger with a diagram on the front panel
that allows the user commands to be identified quickly and
easily.
The directions for use are described below, and we advise
you to read these carefully.
NOTE: The operation of many of the resources mentioned
in this publication depends on technology used by radio
stations and other base stations, which may not be avail-
able at certain times and/or in particular locations.
Recommendations
Road Safety
We recommend that you learn how to use the various radio
features (for example, Station Preset) before you begin your
journey.
WARNING!
Turning the volume up too high may be dangerous for
the driver and other people on the road. You should
adjust the volume so that you are always able to hear
sounds around you (e.g. horns, ambulances, police
cars, etc.).
Radio Reception
Reception varies constantly while driving.
Reception may be affected by mountains, buildings or
bridges, especially when further away from the transmitter
of the tuned radio station.
CAUTION!
When listening to traffic news, you may notice louder
volume compared to normal playback.
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Care And Maintenance
The radio structure is built to guarantee many years of
operation without needing maintenance. In case of a fault,
contact your local authorized dealer.
Use only a soft, anti-static cloth to clean the front of the
radio.
Detergents and waxes can damage the surface.
Identification Number
The radio has a unique identification number (found on the
warranty card). This card is required as proof of ownership
if the radio is stolen or when seeking assistance. Do not
store the warranty card in the vehicle.
Security Code
This radio has a serial number (found on the ⬙warranty
card⬙).
Present this card as proof of ownership if the radio is stolen
or if you require assistance.
Do not store the warranty card in the vehicle.
If the electrical supply is disrupted, the unit will mute and
the display will show ⬙0000⬙ to indicate that you can enter
the security code.
You must enter the security (shown on the ⬙warranty card⬙,
for example, 4359) code as follows:
Action Display
When you turn the radio on, the dis-
play shows ⬙0000⬙.
0000
Push the number 1 preset button until
the first digit of the code number is
displayed.
4---
Push the number 2 preset button until
the second digit of the code number is
displayed.
40--
Push the number 3 preset button until
the third digit of the code number is
displayed.
43--
Push the number 4 preset button until
the fourth digit of the code number is
displayed.
430-
When you finish entering the code,
push the POWER button to accept the
code entered.
4359
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
If you enter the correct code, the radio will start as normal
in radio mode (TUNER). If you enter the wrong code, the
radio will remain locked until disconnected from the
power supply.
If the car radio power supply is disconnected for approxi-
mately eight seconds or longer, you will again be asked for
the security code when it is reconnected.
General
The radio offers the following features:
Radio (Tuner Mode)
• Automatic/Manual station tuning
• Manual storage of 30 stations: 18 in the FM band (6 in
FM1, 6 in FM2 and 6 in FM3), 6 in the AM1 band and 6
in the AM2 band
• Best stations memory
MP3/WMA/AAC (USB Mode)
• “Last position” memory
• MP3/WMA/AAC track selection (forward/reverse)
• MP3/WMA/AAC track fast forward/reverse
• (RND) RaNDom (music shuffle) function
General
• Separate BASS and TREBLE settings
• BALANCE/FADE (balances left/right and front/rear
channels)
• Equalizer
• Loudness
• Digital clock in 24-hour format with weekday setting
• Illuminated buttons and display
• LCD display
• Extended functions field (Setup MENU) allows you to
change the default settings
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect RH3 Display
Description Of Commands
Rotary Knob: Turn radio on and off, volume, forward/
reverse track, confirm selected option.
䉴䉴 And 䉳䉳 Buttons: Station search in automatic mode,
station search in manual mode, forward/reverse tracks,
forward/reverse within track.
Mute/Pause Button: Interrupts the sound by muting or
pausing the audio.
DISP Button: Switches between display modes, clock
display.
RND Button: Enables/Disables shuffle play.
SRC Button: Switches the audio source to TUNER.
Switches the audio source to USB.
Fast Track Buttons (F-Trk): Fast forward/reverse track
(used with the ROTARY knob).
Audio Button: Activates audio setting functions.
Preset Buttons (1 To 6): Store station in memory, access
preset stations.
Buttons 1 And 2: Forward/reverse folder.
Band/AS Button: Select tuned frequency band, preset best
stations.
Menu Button: Access setup menu.
General Functions And Settings
Turn The Radio On Or Off
To turn the radio on or off, push the ROTARY knob (push
once to turn on and hold for about three seconds to turn
off), not dependent on the ignition position.
RH3 Display Panel
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
The default radio configuration is “Auto Switch ON⬙ (see
SETUP MENU section). In this configuration, the radio will
follow two parameters: ignition and previous state. If the
ignition is turned off with the radio on, the radio will be
turned off, but will come on again when the ignition is
turned on. If the ignition is turned off with the radio off, the
radio continues to be turned off when the ignition is turned
on again.
If you prefer, you can set ⬙Auto Switch OFF⬙ (see SETUP
MENU section). The radio will only consider the ignition
switch position when it executes the 60 min function: when
the ignition is turned off, the radio will display the message
⬙60 MIN⬙ for three seconds and switch off automatically
after 60 minutes if no buttons are pushed.
When it is turned on, the radio will display a greeting
message. When it is turned off, the radio will display the
message ⬙GOOD BYE⬙ before it switches off.
Audio
You can use the AUDIO button to access the available
audio settings (described in the sections below).
Equalizer
Pushing the AUDIO button for more than two seconds
activates the audio equalizer functions in the following
sequence: FLAT
POP ROCK CLASSIC VO-
CAL
JAZZ USER FLAT. Push AUDIO repeat-
edly to change the equalization. If this button is not
pushed again within five seconds, or if you push the
ROTARY knob, the display returns to the previously
selected view and the settings will be saved.
Custom Audio Setting Functions
Push the AUDIO button for less than two seconds to
activate the Balance function.
Repeatedly pushing the AUDIO button activates the other
custom audio setting functions in the following sequence:
Bass
Treble Balance Fader Loudness
Bass. If this button is not pushed again within five
seconds, or if you push the ROTARY knob, the display
returns to the previously selected view and the settings
will be saved. USER equalization must be selected to
activate the Bass and Treble functions.
Bass
The display will show ⬙BASS 00⬙ to indicate that the Bass
function can be set. To increase the bass level, turn the
ROTARY knob clockwise. To decrease the bass level, turn
the ROTARY knob counterclockwise. The bass levels can be
set between -15 and 15.
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Treble
The display will show ⬙TREB 00⬙ to indicate that the Treble
function can be set. To increase the treble level, turn the
ROTARY knob clockwise. To decrease the treble level, turn
the ROTARY knob counterclockwise. The treble levels can
be set between -15 and 15.
Balance
The display will show the message ⬙BAL 00⬙ to indicate
that the balance function can be set. Turn the ROTARY
knob clockwise to transfer the sound to the right-hand side;
the display will show ⬙BAL R 01⬙. Turn the ROTARY knob
counterclockwise to transfer the sound to the left-hand
side; the display will show ⬙BALL01⬙. The balance levels
can be set between 0 and 15.
Fader
The display will show ⬙FAD 00⬙ to indicate that you can set
the Fader function. Turn the ROTARY knob clockwise to
transfer the sound to the front; the display will show ⬙FAD
F01⬙. Turn the ROTARY knob counterclockwise to transfer
the sound to the back; the display will show ⬙FADR01⬙.
The fader levels are set from 0 to 15.
Loudness
The display will show ⬙LOUD 00⬙ to indicate that you can
set the loudness (enhanced sound) function. Turn the
ROTARY knob clockwise to enable the loudness function at
level 1; the display will show ⬙LOUD 01⬙ and the LOUD
flag will be enabled. The radio supports three loudness
levels.
Volume
Turn the ROTARY knob clockwise to increase the volume.
Turning it counterclockwise will lower the volume. The
volume can be set between 0 and 30.
Tuner Mode (AM/FM Radio)
When you enter TUNER mode, the radio tunes to the most
recently selected station and will remain on the most
recently selected frequency band.
In this mode of operation the display will show one of the
following 5 codes:
CH (Channel)
When this is on, it indicates that the current radio station
preset is stored in memory. The code is only shown when
the tuned frequency is showing on the display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
ST (Stereo)
When this is on, it indicates the radio station is transmit-
ting.
Searching for Stations In Automatic Mode
When you push
or for less than two seconds, the
radio will search for the next valid station. While the
radio is searching for the new station, the display will
show ⬙SEEKING⬙. When the search is complete, the
display will show the tuned frequency band and station
in the format ⬙F1 106.9⬙ or, if the station was previously
stored in memory, the display will show the channel
where it is stored and the tuned station.
Searching for Stations In Manual Mode
Pushing
or for more than two seconds displays
the selected radio station frequency. Each time a button
is pushed, the radio station frequency is increased or
decreased according to the default search pattern for the
selected band (100 kHz for FM and 10k Hz for AM).
When the search button is pushed and held, the radio
station frequency will continue to be increased or de-
creased. If the buttons are not pushed for five seconds,
the display will show the message ⬙AUTO⬙ and manual
search mode will be canceled. When the search is
complete, the display will show the tuned band and
station in the format ⬙F1 106.9⬙, or, if the station found
was previously stored in memory, the display will show
the channel where it is stored and the tuned station.
Mute/Pause
Pushing this button mutes the sound. The display will
switch between ⬙MUTE ON⬙ and the previous display (3
seconds).
Pushing the button again restores the audio without chang-
ing the original volume setting. The display will show
⬙MUTE OFF⬙ for three seconds, and then return to the
previous display mode.
When the
or , Audio, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, BAND/AS
buttons and SRC are pushed in ⬙Mute/Paused⬙ mode,
these will be implemented and the audio will be re-
stored without changing the original volume.
Turn the ROTARY knob to restore the audio and change the
volume to the level selected. The display will show the
settings described in the volume function.
The other buttons should be implemented when pushed,
but the radio will remain in ⬙MUTE ON⬙ mode.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Storing Stations In Memory
Push and hold the memory buttons (1 through 6) for more
than two seconds to associate the tuned station with the
pushed button. The display will show a message in
⬙MEMO 2⬙ format for three seconds to confirm that the
station has been tuned in. The CH signal is then activated
and the display will show the preset number and station
frequency for three seconds ⬙2 106.9⬙. The display will then
return to the previous view.
Accessing Preset Stations
When the preset buttons (1 through 6) are pushed for less
than two seconds the radio will tune in to the station
associated with that particular memory location. The dis-
play shows the preset number and frequency of the asso-
ciated station for three seconds. The display will then
return to the previous view.
Retuning the band: When the BAND/AS button is pushed
for less than two seconds, the radio will alternate between
bands in the sequence: FM1
FM2 FM3 AM1
AM2 FM1. While changing bands from the FM3
band to
AM1, the display will show ⬙AM⬙ for two
seconds and when changing from the AM2 band to
FM1, the display will show ⬙FM⬙ for two seconds.
The display will then show the selected band and fre-
quency in the format ⬙F1 106.9⬙ for two seconds and then
return to the previous view.
Presetting stations with a strong signal: when the
BAND/AS button is pushed for more than two seconds,
the radio will search for the 6 best stations and automati-
cally store them in the 6 memory positions of the current
band. During the search, the display will indicate ⬙FM AST⬙
or ⬙AM AST⬙, depending on the band selected. To record
the stations that are found, these are sorted in ascending
order of frequency and the first one is stored in memory
position 1, and so on, until positions 1-6 are all in use. If
fewer than 6 stations are found, the unused channels will
be allocated to the 107.9 MHz frequency for FM and AM
1710 KHz for the AM band. At the end of the search
process, the radio tunes in to the first preset position and
the display will indicate the associated preset number (1)
and the station frequency for three seconds. The display
will then return to the previous view.
Setup Menu
You can use the Setup menu to change the various factory
settings to suit your own preferences.
Push MENU to activate the Maximum Volume function.
Repeatedly pushing this button will activate the other
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
functions in the following sequence: Maximum Volume
(MVOL)
Auto Switch (AUTO) Beep (BEEP) Set
Clock Maximum Volume (MVOL). If this button or
the button for adjusting the selected function is not
pushed for five seconds or if the ROTARY knob is
pushed, the display returns to the previous view and
the changes will be saved.
Maximum Volume
This function allows you to set the maximum permissible
volume. Turn the ROTARY knob to set the volume. The
display will show a message in the format ⬙MVOL 26⬙
indicating the maximum volume selected. When the maxi-
mum volume selected is the maximum radio volume, the
display will show ⬙MVOL OFF⬙.
Auto Switch
This function changes the on/off sequence of the radio as
described in the section: ⬙Turning the device on and off.⬙ To
enable it, turn the ROTARY knob clockwise. The display
will show ⬙AUTO ON⬙. To disable it, turn the ROTARY
knob counterclockwise and the display will show ⬙AUTO
OFF⬙.
Beep
With this feature is enabled, the radio will emit a beep
when any knob is activated.
Clock settings
When you select this function, the display will show the
clock. To select the field to be set, push
or . Turn the
ROTARY knob to adjust the selected field.
Clock
Pushing the DISP button for more than two seconds
enables or disables the clock display. When this feature is
enabled, the display shows ⬙CLK ON⬙ and the clock is
displayed whenever the ignition is switched on, even if the
radio is off. This function takes priority in the display
whenever you access any of the radio functions. If no
buttons are pushed within ten seconds, the display will go
back to showing the clock. When this function is disabled,
the display shows ⬙CLK OFF⬙.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
USB Mode (MP3/WMA/AAC)
CAUTION!
To remove devices connected to the USB port, first
select the other audio source. Failure to follow this
procedure can cause damage to the connected device.
Due to the extensive range of makes and models of
storage devices available on the market, not all devices
have compatibility required for proper functioning of
Car Radios. Use only quality USB devices.
Due to the extensive range of brands and models of storage
devices available on the market, not all devices are com-
patible with proper functioning of the car radio.
NOTE: The car radio is only compatible with USB mass
storage devices that are fully compatible with the USB 2.0
standard. Use quality USB devices only.
In USB mode, the radio plays MP3, WMA and AAC files
stored on the device connected to the USB port that is
located on the lower right side of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
To enter USB mode, you must push the SRC button. When
you enter USB mode, the display shows ⬙LOADING⬙ while
the radio checks whether the connected device is valid.
If there is no USB device, an invalid USB device, or a valid
device that is defective, the display will show ⬙ERR USB⬙
for two seconds and the radio remains in TUNER mode. If
a valid device does not contain any playable files (i.e. MP3,
WMA or AAC), the display will show ⬙NO MUSIC⬙ for two
seconds and the radio remains in TUNER mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
If playable files are found, the radio will also check that the connected device is the same as the one used immediately
before the USB function. If this is the case, music playback will start from the point where it was interrupted (file and music
runtime). If not, the file played will be the first valid file, in the sequence shown in the following example:
File Sequence
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play Sequence (File) Comments
1 Track 1_1 If there are MP3, WMA or AAC (extensions mp3, wma, m4a, mp4 and 3gp) files in
the root folder, these will be played first.
2 Track 2_1 Folders within the same level are sorted in ascending order by name (up to folder
number 100, after which the order follows that in which they were recorded on the
USB device).
3 Track 3_1
4 Track 4_1
5 Track 4_2
6 Track 5_1 Files within a folder are sorted in ascending order by name (up to file number 100,
thereafter, the order follows that in which they were recorded on the USB device).
7 Track 5_2
8 Track 5_3
9 Track 5_4
10 Track 6_1
Forward/Reverse Track
When you push
for less than two seconds, the radio
will advance to the next audio file on the device. When
you push
for less than two seconds, the radio will
skip back to the beginning of the track. If this button is
pushed again, the radio will skip back to the previous
audio file on the device.
When these buttons are pushed, the display will show a
⬙TRKyyy⬙ message, where yyy is the track number. If any
of these buttons is briefly pushed again, the number in the
display will continue changing according to the selected
track. While the track is being selected, that is, when
or
are pushed briefly, the information contained in the
ID3 tag will not be processed (the ID3 tag can store
information such as the title, artist, album, track num-
ber, etc.). If neither
or are pushed down and held,
the track will be selected and the ID3 tag will be
processed and begin playing. In this case, the display
will show ⬙TRKyyy⬙ for two seconds and then return to
the DISP function view. Whenever the radio switches
from one folder to another, the display will show the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
name of the folder you are moving to for at least 500 ms
(seek button movements are ignored during this time),
and no longer than three seconds.
When you reach the final song in the last folder and push
again, the radio will advance to the first song in the
first folder on the USB device. When you reach the first
song in the first folder and push
again, the radio will
advance to the final song in the last folder on the USB
device.
Forward/Reverse Along The Track:
When
or is pushed for more than two seconds, the
radio will reverse or forward the music for as long as the
button is held down. The display shows the runtime of
the music in the format ⬙003 01:32⬙ (track number and
runtime). When the operation is completed, the display
will continue to display the music runtime for two
seconds. After that it returns to the previous view.
Mute/Pause
Pushing this knob stops music playback and mutes the
sound. The display will switch between ⬙PAUSED⬙ and the
current view (three seconds).
Push this button again to resume music playback from the
point where it left off, without changing the original
volume level. The display will show ⬙PLAY⬙ for three
seconds. It then returns to the previous mode.
When
or , Audio, 1, 2, and SRC are pushed in
⬙Mute/Paused⬙ mode, playback (where applicable) will
resume and the sound will be restored without chang-
ing the original volume level.
Turn the ROTARY knob to resume playing the music and
change the volume accordingly. The display will feature
the information described in the volume function.
Pushing the F-TRACK button will not resume play, but
using the (F-TRK + rotation) function will start or resume
play.
The other buttons should be implemented when pushed,
but the radio will remain in ⬙Mute/Paused⬙ mode.
Fast Track: Pushing the F-TRK button activates FAST
TRACK mode and the display will show the name of the
current folder. If the ROTARY knob is not activated, the
radio returns to its previous state.
If the ROTARY knob is turned, the display shows the
⬙TRKyyy⬙ message, where yyy is the track number. Turning
the knob clockwise will forwards the tracks and turning it
counterclockwise will reverse the tracks. While this is being
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
performed, the information contained in the ID3 tag is not
processed. As the knob is turned, the ⬙TRKyyy⬙ message
changes to the track selected.
When the ROTARY knob is pushed or if its position is not
changed for five seconds, the track is selected, the ID3 tag
is processed and the music will start playing. In this case,
the display will show the ⬙TRKyyy⬙ message for two
seconds and then return to the default display defined by
the DISP function.
When the radio skips from one folder to another, the
display will show the name of the folder to which you are
moving for a few milliseconds (the rotary movements are
ignored during this period) and a maximum of three
seconds. When you reach the final track in the last folder
and turn the ROTARY knob clockwise, the radio will
advance to the first track in the first folder on the USB
device. When you reach the first track in the first folder and
turn the ROTARY knob counterclockwise, the radio will
advance to the last track in the last folder on the USB
device.
Forward/Reverse Folder
When you push the memory 1 button, the radio will
advance to the first track in the next folder containing
audio files, if you push button 2, the radio will return to the
first track in the previous folder containing audio files.
When this operation is complete, the display shows the
name of the selected folder. If you push any of these
buttons again quickly, the name shown is updated as you
select folders on the USB device. While the track is being
selected, that is, when you push buttons 1 or 2 quickly, the
information contained in ID3 tag is not processed. If you do
not push and hold 1 or 2, the track is selected, the ID3 tag
is processed and the music will start playing. In this case,
the display will continue showing the name of the selected
folder for two seconds and then return to the default
display defined by the DISP function.
Whenever the radio skips from one folder to another, the
display will show the name of the folder to which you are
going for a few milliseconds (the rotary movements are
ignored during this period) and a maximum of three seconds.
When you reach the last folder and push Button 1 again, the
radio will advance to the next folder on the USB device. When
you reach the first folder and push Button 2 again, the radio
will advance to the next folder on the USB device.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Shuffle (Random Playback)
Pushing the RND button enables or disables the ⬙shuffle⬙
feature. When enabled, the RND indicator is switched on
and the display will show ⬙RND ON⬙ for two seconds. The
display will then revert to the previous view.
When you push this button again, the function is disabled,
the RND indicator is turned off and the display will show
⬙RND OFF⬙ for two seconds. The display then reverts to the
previous view.
If the RND function is enabled, the music forward/reverse
will be random, both in normal mode and Fast Track mode.
In this case, Buttons 1 and 2 (forward/reverse folder) have
the exact same function as
or (music forward/
reverse), respectively.
Switching Between Display Modes
When you push the DISP button for less than two seconds,
information about the track being played will alternate in
the following sequence: Track
Time Title Album
Artist File Folder Track. At the first touch of
the button, the display now shows the information type
related to the track being played, for example, if the
current information is track, the display will show
⬙TIME⬙. If you push any other buttons or if the DISP
button is not pushed for two seconds, the information
type that is on the display will be selected. When the file
that is being played does not contain the selected
information, the radio will display ⬙NO NAME.⬙
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 3.0, and 5.0
radio, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features. Many
features can vary by vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a power and back
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the power button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the power button on the faceplate a
second time to turn the screen on.
Push the back button on the faceplate to exit out of a menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Uconnect 5.0 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer Programmable Features — 5.0 Settings
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock & Date, Safety & Driving
Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore
Settings and Clear Personal Data.
NOTE:
• Only one category may be selected at a time.
• The Back arrow will change into a Done button if any
changes are made.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to
return to the previous menu or press the X button on the
touchscreen to return to the Main Settings screen. Pressing
the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
Up Arrow Button Down Arrow Button
NOTE: This feature is only available in Manual Display Mode.
Display Brightness With
the Headlights Off
Up Arrow Button Down Arrow Button
NOTE: This feature is only available in Manual Display Mode.
Set Language Desired Language Button
NOTE: The button will highlight showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep Yes No
Display Trip B
Units — If Equipped Temperature (°F or °C) Distance (mi or km) Fuel Consumption
NOTE: If the distance is in mi (miles), miles per gallon (mpg) are set automatically. If the distance is km, km /1 or
1/100km can be selected.
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time And
Format —
If Equipped
12h 24h AM PM
Show Time Statues
— If Equipped
On Off
Set Date Day Month
NOTE:
By selecting this Setting, the day and month can be updated. The selectable days range from 1–31 (depending on
month). The selectable months consist of Jan/Feb/March/April/May/June/July/Aug/Sept/Oct/Nov/Dec.
Sync Time —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE: When this setting is selected, the time will set automatically based upon GPS location.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Rear Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines — If Equipped
NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with
active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the
steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running Lights —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE: When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is
running.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer +–
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the
“+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the
setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Speaker Icon”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
— If Equipped
Off 1 2 3
NOTE: The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
Loudness —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE: The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Auto - On Radio On Off Last Recall
NOTE: Press the “Auto - On Radio” button on the touchscreen to set how the radio behaves when the ignition is
switched to ON.
AUX Volume Offset +–
NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX
input.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones/Devices List of Paired Phones/Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Restore Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default
settings. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on
the touchscreen to exit.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB Port and Auxiliary Jack is located on the instru-
ment panel left of the radio (driver’s lower right). This
feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
USB Charging Port
The USB connector port can be used for charging purposes
only. Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or
external USB device to the vehicle’s USB charging port
which is located next to the 12V power outlet near the cup
holder on passenger side.
NOTE: If the device battery to be charged is completely
depleted, it may take awhile to charge.
USB Port And AUX Jack
1 — USB Port 2 — AUX Audio Jack
Passenger Compartment USB Charging Port
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
result in a collision.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch and controls
the SCAN functions of the sound system.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch and controls
the volume of the sound system plus a button to mute the
Sound System.
The following describes the right-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Scan” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Scan” down for the next listenable station.
CD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
Remote Sound System Controls
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g, scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the phone, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect
(if equipped).
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, airflow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
three outer rotary dials (blower speed, temperature and
mode) and three inner push buttons (Recirculation, A/C,
Rear Window Defroster).
Manual Temperature Controls
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the Knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates
cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the OFF position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Modes Control
Turn the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Icon Description
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Additional Rear Climate Control — If Equipped
This switch, mounted on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering column, activates the additional rear heating/
air conditioning system vent.
NOTE: The switch must be enabled for operation by the
Upfitter.
Additional Rear Climate Control Switch
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is
selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and
then turn off.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. A
solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) cool-
ant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Main-
tenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed
by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging be-
comes a problem increase blower speed. Vehicle windows
tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid
weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenances Procedure” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the
dome lamp and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect 3.0
Uconnect 5.0
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or PHONE button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push To MUTE
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
AText
3 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
4 — Push To End Call
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 3.0 VR
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV VR
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
Help. The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and Aux-
iliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated for
the Uconnect radio, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Media
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
PHONE button
and say Listen. (Must have compat-
ible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
PHONE button
. After the beep, say... “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start
without me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me. Are you
there yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports
reading incoming text messages only.
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trade-
marks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES .................182
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ......182
▫ Normal Starting ........................182
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..................182
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................182
▫ After Starting..........................183
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .183
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............183
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ................184
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .185
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ...........185
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ..........192
▫ Acceleration...........................192
▫ Traction .............................193
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER ..............193
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ...................193
▫ Shallow Standing Water ..................193
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................194
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ...............195
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................196
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................197
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM .....197
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . .197
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) .............198
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ................199
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...........200
▫ T
railer Sway Control (TSC) ................202
5
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) ...................203
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ..............204
▫ Tire Markings .........................204
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............207
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ...........209
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ............210
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .........215
▫ Tire Pressure ..........................215
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ..................216
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation .....217
▫ Radial Ply Tires ........................217
▫ Tire Types ............................218
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ..............219
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................219
▫ Tire Spinning .........................222
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ...................222
▫ Life Of Tire ...........................223
▫ Replacement Tires ......................223
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .........224
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS ......225
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ...............................226
▫ Base System...........................228
▫ General Information ....................230
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................230
▫ 3.6L Engine ...........................230
▫ Reformulated
Gasoline ..................230
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............231
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.........231
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......231
▫ MMT In Gasoline.......................232
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................232
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................233
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............233
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................234
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................234
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............235
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................235
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ................235
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................237
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............237
▫ Towing Tips ..........................246
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) .............247
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .247
▫ Recreational Towing —
Automatic Transmission ..................248
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) posi-
tion and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails
to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
WARNING! (Continued)
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children). A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once
removed the transmission is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the
key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to
the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not), and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: Swivel seats that are unlocked can also prevent the
transmission gear selector from being moved out of the
PARK position. To shift the transmission out of the PARK
position the first time after cranking is allowed, ensure
swivel seats are locked in the forward facing position.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Op-
eration” in this section for further information).
Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Moving the gear selector into the ERS (-/+) position
(beside the DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays
the current gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents
automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the
highest available gear.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3,
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access
to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the ignition key.
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the ignition
key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Op-
erating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), select Tow/Haul mode or use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Elec-
tronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch
is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to
the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this sec-
tion). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission tem-
perature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the
transmission will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Moving the gear selector to
the ERS position (beside DRIVE) will activate ERS mode,
display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set
that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode,
moving the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) will
change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
Instrument
Cluster
Display
123456D
Actual
Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear selector into
the ERS position, then tap it forward (-) repeatedly as the
vehicle slows. The transmission will shift to the range from
which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
trolled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will auto-
matically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions
are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate
temperature.
•
The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) during
steady braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually
after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the
engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch
is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of Over-
drive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-
sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid
partially draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning, and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
WARNING! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should be checked at every
oil change if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordi-
nate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located on the outboard side of
the drivers seat. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever
up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull
the lever up slightly, push the release button with your
thumb, then lower the lever completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
(Continued)
Parking Brake
1 — Parking Brake Release Button
2 — Parking Brake Lever
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmis-
sion in FIRST gear or REVERSE gear. Failure to do so
may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the park-
ing brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and
Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems complement the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking condi-
tions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the
light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system
reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the igni-
tion Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault
detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering effi-
ciency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the
vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system
reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing
sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These
occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is
functioning properly.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of
wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s)
and engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced accel-
eration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to
the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in the
instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This indicates
that the TCS is active. If the indicator light flashes during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not
switch off the ESC or TCS.
WARNING!
• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded.
• The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-
planing.
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the
vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking ma-
neuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation
by sensing the rate and amount of brake application, and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the ABS. Applying
the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous
braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once
the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional
control and stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents re-
sulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropri-
ate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC equipped
vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
driving situations. ESC should only be turned off for
specific reasons as noted below.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the “ESC
Off” switch.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off” mode,
ESC will operate without engine torque management. This
mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow,
sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC
would normally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
WARNING!
• When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the ⴖESC Off
Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated. When in ⴖPartial
Offⴖ mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pushing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation
requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the
“ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine
power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active
automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recog-
nized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
Towing” in this section for further information. When TSC
is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels
to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during
this short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system
will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the
intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or greater
hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing
uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will
not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always
remember the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, when the brake pedal is
released, there may not be enough brake pressure to
hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object
behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the hill
while resuming acceleration, manually activate the
trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle
or object. Always remember to use the parking brake
while parking on a hill, and that the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
(Continued)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”,
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Own-
er’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple-
ment located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer tow-
ing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further infor-
mation.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep in-
flated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ponents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• Tire chains for a 225/75R16 tire with a Quality Chain
Corp Light Truck Highway Service (Non-Cam) tire chain
or equivalent is recommended.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure
Tire Rotation
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In
this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Five Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be acti-
vated, and the “Check tire pressure” text message will
display when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have
been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable” text message will
display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a regular size spare
wheel.
1. The spare tire has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, but
it is not monitored until it is mounted in place of any of
the existing four road tires.
2. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has
a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon
the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON due
to the low tire condition. Then, after driving the vehicle
for up to 20 minutes above 15mph (24km/h), the system
will recognize the new sensor, and turn off the telltale.
3. If a spare tire not equipped with tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor is used, then the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn ON, flashing for 75 seconds and
then remaining solid for each subsequent ignition key
cycle.
NOTE: For correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior,
please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off during each tire
substitution.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of higher octane “Pre-
mium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any
benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emis-
sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please ob-
serve pump labels as they should clearly communicate
if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on, due
to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check fuel cap” message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap
is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys-
tem” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
If the problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of vehicle
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is impor-
tant that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it
is not over the GVWR.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is supported by a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch
receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while
traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed
the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always block
or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
Trailer Electrical Connector Location
1 — Four-Pin Connector Location
2 — Seven-Pin Connector Location
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift-
ing does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode
or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range
Select [ERS] shift control).
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve per-
formance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over-
heating, activate the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving
in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe
grades.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with diesel engine and
electric park brake, see important information in the Diesel
Supplement.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission
in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............250
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............250
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .251
▫ Torque Specifications ....................251
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........252
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage...................252
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .253
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........254
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........256
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........260
▫ Jack And Tools Location ..................260
▫ Removing The Spare Tire .................262
▫ Preparations ..........................266
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................267
▫ Wheel Covers .........................274
䡵 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES ............275
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ...............275
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure .................276
▫ Battery Location .......................278
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............279
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............280
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............281
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................282
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................283
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............283
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
250 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
145 Ft-Lbs (197 N·m) M16 x 1.50 21 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 251
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger seat.
Torque Patterns
252 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button
(4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on
the bottom side of the
Tire Service Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 253
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing A
Tire With Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle
And Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid inject-
ing sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
254 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
sources.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 255
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
NEUTRAL (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the park-
ing brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
256 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning on the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 257
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
258 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
(1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 259
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack And Tools Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
Jack Kit Location
260 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To release the jack kit for it’s storage location, you must
push down and turn the lock knob 1/4 turn counter
clockwise to the unlock position.
CAUTION!
Do not force lock knob over limit. Damage to lock
knob may occur.
To open the jack kit container you must push the containers
release to separate the top and bottom.
Lock Knob
1 — Unlock Position
2 — Lock Position
Container Release
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 261
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. Attach the lug bolt adapter to the winch exten-
sion and insert it into the winch mechanism.
Jacking Tools
1 — Wrench Handle
2—TowEye
3 — Lug Bolt Adaptor
4 — Jack
5 — Tool Handle
6 — Reversible Tool
7 — Winch Extension
Jack Tools
1 — Winch Extension
2 — Lug Bolt Adapter
3 — Wrench Handle
262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
The winch mechanism is located under the rear of the
vehicle to the right of the spare tire.
Winch Location
Winch Extension
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 263
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack
to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
Lowering Spare Tire
Spare Tire
264 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the retainer nut prior to removing the retainer
from the wheel.
5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable.
Retainer Nut Lifting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 265
6. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake firmly.
4. Place the transmission in PARK (REVERSE for manual
transmission) .
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the right front
tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being jacked.
Retainer
266 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug bolts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of
the vehicle body.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
Assembled Jack
Jacking Engagement Locations
268 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The rear jacking location is located in front of the
rear tire and in front of the leaf spring mount.
NOTE: The front jacking location is located behind the
front tire and in front of the driver/passenger door.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
Rear Jacking Location Front Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 269
3. Place the wrench handle and lug bolt adapter on the jack
screw and turn to the right until the jack head is
properly engaged in the described location. Do not raise
the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely
engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the wrench handle and lug bolt adapter. Raise the
vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and
enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel lug bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the spare tire.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug bolt torque.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
10. Stow the damaged wheel/spare tire with the cable and
wheel spacer before driving the vehicle.
11. Install the winch extension and rotate the wrench
handle clockwise until the winch mechanism indica-
tion window turns yellow and the operator hears “3
clicks” from the device to show the wheel is properly
stowed under the vehicle.
Winch Mechanism Properly Engaged (Yellow DOT
Will Appear In The Winch Indication Window)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271
CAUTION!
In the case that the yellow dot does not appear in the
winch mechanism window refer to step 11 above, the
operator should repeat the spare tire installation pro-
cedure. If the yellow dot does not appear in the winch
indication window, place and secure the damaged
wheel into the vehicle and seek dealer assistance to the
winch mechanism.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools back
in the storage compartment.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
13. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure, as required.
Winch Mechanism NOT Properly Engaged
(Black Window Will Appear)
272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
For vehicles with aluminum wheels:
1. Remove the adapter bracket and bolts from the storage
bag in the glove compartment.
2. Take the retainer and position it inside the circular
bracket.
3. Tighten the knob on the bolt to secure it to the bracket.
Adapter/Bracket Union
Securing The Bracket
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273
4. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted adapter
on the inner part of the rim. Using the supplied bolts,
fasten the wheel to the adapter using the bolt install
wrench. Tighten the bolts with the wrench extension
and wrench handle.
5. Follow the steps above for proper spare tire stowage.
Wheel Covers
CAUTION!
Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub
cap, damage to the hub cap finish may occur.
The wheel covers on the vehicle are held in place by the
wheel lug bolts and can be removed after the wheel lug
bolts are taken off.
Alloy Wheel Mounting Wheel/Bolts Attaching To Mounting Bracket
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The vehicle’s jump starting remote posts are located under
the hood, in the engine compartment on the driver’s side.
The Remote Positive (+) Post is covered with a protective
cap located on the side of the Front Power Distribution
Center.
The Remote Negative (-) Post is located on the core support
closest to the front of the vehicle.
Jump Starting Remote Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and turn the ignition to the OFF
position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The remote positive (+) post is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side under the cover of
the Front Power Distribution Center.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
NOTE: The remote negative (-) post is located in the front
of the engine compartment on the driver’s side.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, disconnect the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from
the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive end (+) of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Close the cover of the Front Power Distribution Center.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Battery Location
There are two remote jump starting posts under the hood
which is the recommended jump start location. If access to
the battery is needed, an access panel on the driver’s side
floor will allow for battery access.
Access Panel
278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Shift back and forth between DRIVE and RE-
VERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the
rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE: Vehicles with diesel engine (automated manual
transmission) cannot be rocked in this manner, because the
transmission will not allow shifts between forward and
REVERSE gears while the wheels are turning.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to
free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙
switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
Battery Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck. And do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover which is located
below the gear selector.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
ALL Models
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Rear
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with diesel engine and
electric park brake, see important information in the Diesel
Supplement.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out
of PARK for towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 281
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Automatic Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with front wheels
on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), tow with the front wheels OFF the ground
(using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift equipment with the
front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
• Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) func-
tion.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ...........287
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .288
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................288
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............289
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................289
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ...................290
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................290
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .............290
▫ Engine Oil ...........................291
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................293
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................293
▫ Exhaust System ........................294
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................296
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............296
▫ Body Lubrication ......................299
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................299
▫ Cooling System ........................300
▫ Brake System .........................305
▫ Automatic Transmission
(3.6L Gasoline Engine Only) ...............306
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion ........................307
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . .313
䡵 FUSES ................................313
▫ Underhood Fuses .......................314
▫ Interior Fuses..........................318
▫ Right Central Pillar Fuses .................321
䡵 VEHICLE
STORAGE .....................322
7
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS ...................322
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................324
▫ Headlamps Low Beam And High beam .......324
▫ Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps ..........324
▫ Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)/Front Side
Marker Lamp .........................325
▫ Front Fog Lamps .......................326
▫ Front, Rear Roof Lamps ..................326
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup, Turn Signal And
Rear Side Marker Lamps..................326
▫ Cargo Lamp ..........................327
▫ Dome Lamps ..........................328
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................329
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ...............................330
▫ Engine ..............................330
▫ Chassis .............................332
286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Washer Solvent Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6 — Coolant Reservoir
7 — Power Steering Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler
cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “Check fuel
cap” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in ”Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is
an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
problem persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the
problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on
the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289
•
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illumi-
nated until you place the ignition in the off position or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled main-
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho-
rized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
flush is needed because of component malfunction,
use only the specified fluid for the flushing proce-
dure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the
oil level within the SAFE crosshatch marking on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the mark will result in reading the top of the
mark on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum In-
stitute (API). The manufacturer only rec-
ommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-
30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
WARNING! (Continued)
Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment
before starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do
so can result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product. However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet in the
engine compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Remove the two screws that secure the filter retainer to
the fresh air inlet, and remove the filter retainer.
2. Remove and replace the A/C air filter from the filter
retainer.
3. Install the A/C air filter/filter retainer back into the
fresh air inlet. When installing the filter retainer make
sure the retainer is fully engaged.
4. Install the two screws back into the assembly to secure
the filter retainer to the fresh air inlet.
Accessing Air Filter
1 — Screw Locations
2 — Fresh Air Inlet
Removing Air Filer
1 — Fresh Air Inlet
2 — A/C Air Filter
3 — A/C Air Filter Retainer
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment
and should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reser-
voir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator anti-
freeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush
out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to
the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only by an authorized
dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face
of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be
added to the system, please contact your local authorized dealer.
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob-
ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-
diately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” marks.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
WARNING! (Continued)
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
(3.6L Gasoline Engine Only)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications.
It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your
authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage
or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently dam-
age this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD
SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting at
one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the liner
from the water and dip it back into the water about six
times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the
liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the
excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with
a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and push the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment. To access the
fuses, remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component corresponding
to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 40 Amp Orange – Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Pump
F02 20 Amp Yellow
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
– Starter Relay 3.6L (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F02 50 Amp Red
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
– Glow Plug Unit (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F04 50 Amp Red
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
– Secondary Power Distribution Center (PDC)
(Trans Power Relay, Vacuum Pump, KL30 for the Shifter
Transmission Module [STM]) (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F04 40 Amp Orange
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
– Fuel Filter Heater (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F05 30 Amp Green – SELESPEED Pump RELE (3.0 Diesel Engine) —
If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Orange
(non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
– Engine Cooling Fan - 2nd Speed
F07 50 Amp Red
(non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
– Engine Cooling Fan - 1st Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Passenger Compartment Blower
F09 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F11 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pressure Regulator (MPROP)-DRV
(3.0 Diesel Engine) — If Equipped
F14 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
F15 – 7.5 Amp Brown USB Charger
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Shifter Transmission Module (STM) (3.6),
KL15 Starter Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Manual Transmission Automated (MTA),
KL15 Gear Selector Unit, KL15 Engine Control Module
(ECM), KL15 Starter Relay Coil (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Injectors
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Secondary Loads, Engine Control Module (ECM)
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
F18 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM),
KL30 Main Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F18 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL30 Manual Transmission Automated (MTA),
KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM),
KL30 Main Relay Coil (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown A/C Compressor — If Equipped
F20 – 30 Amp Green Windshield Wiper
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Ignition Coils
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Primary Loads
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Valves
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Vacuum Pump Relay Coil
(3.6 Gasoline Engine) — If Equipped
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Mirrors
Front PDC Additional Fuses
The additional fuse box is located inside the front PDC Box.
Front Power Distribution Center Additional Fuses
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F61 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump (3.6 Gasoline Engine) — If Equipped
F62 30 Amp Green Transmission Power RELE (3.6 Gasoline Engine) —
If Equipped
F64 7.5 Amp Brown Urea Pump (3.0 Diesel Engine) — If Equipped
F65 25 Amp White Urea NOX Sensor 1–2 — PM Sensor
(3.0 Diesel Engine) — If Equipped
F66 5 Amp Beige Shifter Transmission Module (STM)
(3.6 Gasoline Engine) — If Equipped
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module
(BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel.
Fuse Panel
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F12 10 Amp Red Right Low Beam
F13 10 Amp Red Left Low Beam
F31 5 Amp Beige INT/A
F32 10 Amp Red SBMT
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F34 7.5 Amp Brown Clearance Lights
F36 15 Amp Blue +30 (ACM – TPCU – RRM – DLC)
F37 5 Amp Beige INT (BRAKE NO – IPC)
F38 15 Amp Blue Central Locking
F42 5 Amp Beige INT (BSM – SAS – BRAKE NC)
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
F49 5 Amp Beige INT (PAM – CCS – RRM – ECM)
F50 7.5 Amp Brown INT (ORC)
F51 5 Amp Beige INT (REAR CAMERA-AUX)
F53 5 Amp Beige +30 (IPC)
F90 7.5 Amp Brown Left High Beam
F91 7.5 Amp Brown Right High Beam
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Lamp
F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Lamp
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Right Central Pillar Fuses
The right central pillar fuse panel is located on the interior
side at the base of the passenger side B pillar.
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F81 7.5 Amp Brown Seat Heater
F83 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Windows Heater
F84 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Windows Heater
F86 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Battery) — If Equipped
F87 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Ignition) — If Equipped
Fuse Panel Location
Fuse Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Sun Visors C5W
Courtesy Lamp FF500
Glove Compartment C5W
Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp H7LL
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps 7444NA
Daytime Running Lamps (If Equipped) 7440
Front Side Marker Lamps WY5W
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps 7443
Rear Turn Signal Lamps 7440NA
Rear Backup Lamps 921
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Fog Lamps H11
License Plate Lamps C5W
Front Roof Lamps WY5W
Rear Roof Lamps W3W
NOTE:
•
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
•
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam And High beam
NOTE: Passenger side headlamp must be removed for
bulb replacement, for driver side headlamp go to step 6
through step 12.
1. Remove one screw on the lower headlamp filler panel.
2. Remove two screws on the upper headlamp filler panel.
3. Remove one upper screw from the headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower screws from the headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward.
6. Remove appropriate plastic cap from the back of the
headlamp housing.
7. Push down on the upper portion of the socket.
8. Pull the socket outward from reflector.
9. Pull bulb outward from socket.
10. Install new bulb.
11. Push socket back into reflector until it locks back into
place.
12. Install access cap.
13. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same position on
the vehicle, so as not to affect headlamp aiming.
14. Install one upper screw on the headlamp housing.
15. Install two lower screws on the headlamp housing.
16. Carefully reinstall one screw on the lower headlamp
filler panel.
17. Carefully reinstall two screws on the upper headlamp
filler panel.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps
NOTE: Passenger side headlamp must be removed for
bulb replacement, for driver side headlamp go to step 6
through step 7.
1. Remove one screw on the lower headlamp filler panel.
2. Remove two screws on the upper headlamp filler panel.
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove one upper screw from the headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower screws from the headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward.
6. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
7. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
8. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same position on the
vehicle, so as not to affect headlamp aiming.
9. Install the one upper screw on headlamp housing.
10. Install the two lower screws on headlamp housing.
11. Carefully reinstall one screw on the lower headlamp
filler panel.
12. Carefully reinstall two screws the on upper headlamp
filler panel.
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)/Front Side Marker
Lamp
NOTE: Passenger side headlamp must be removed for
bulb replacement, for driver side headlamp go to step 6
through step 8.
1. Remove one screw on the lower headlamp filler panel.
2. Remove two screws on the upper headlamp filler panel.
3. Remove one upper screw from the headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower screws from the headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward.
6. Remove the DRL, side marker bulb by pulling straight
out.
7. Replace lamp as required and lock in place.
8. Reinstall plastic cap.
9. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same position on the
vehicle, as not to affect headlamp aiming.
10. Install the one upper screw on the headlamp housing.
11. Install the two lower screws on the headlamp housing.
12. Carefully reinstall one screw on the lower headlamp
filler panel.
13. Carefully reinstall two screws on the upper headlamp
filler panel.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
Front Fog Lamps
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access cover in wheel liner.
2. Open the cover on the front of the wheel liner.
3. Remove connection and replace the bulb.
4. Connect the wire and rotate bulb/socket clockwise into
lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the wheel
liner.
Front, Rear Roof Lamps
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp assembly.
2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counterclockwise.
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
5. Reinstall lamp.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup, Turn Signal And Rear Side
Marker Lamps
1. Open rear doors.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp.
3. Remove the tail/stop, turn signal, backup and rear side
marker bulb/socket by rotating counter-clockwise.
4. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
5. Reinstall bulb/socket and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
6. Reinstall lamp.
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Lamp
1. Using a suitable tool, remove either the lamp above the
back door or the sliding door lamp as needed and
disconnect it.
2. Using a suitable tool, pull open the metal bulb access on
the back of the housing.
3. Remove and install the replacement bulb.
4. Close the bulb access, connect the lamp and install the
lamp into place.
Rear Cargo Lamp Bulb Access
Cargo Lamp Bulb Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
Dome Lamps
1. Using a suitable tool, insert the tip at the location shown
and press inward to the lamp to relieve the spring
tension. This will allow you to easily drop the dome
lamp assembly from its bracket and disconnect the
lamp.
2. Using a suitable tool, flex the housing to lift the light
pod cover away from the unit.
Dome Lamp Assembly Location
1. Spring Tension Relief Access 2. Dome Lamp Assembly
Dome Lamp Light Pod Cover
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove and replace the bulbs as needed. 4. Close the housing cover making sure it snaps together
properly and connect the lamp.
5. Install overhead console into place making sure to seat
the assembly’s forward end first and then snapping it
flush so that the tension spring is fully seating in the
housing.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 24 Gallons 90 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
10.5 Quarts 10 Liters
Dome Lamp Light Bulbs
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 3.6L Gasoline Engine Only Use Only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to
use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission. We recommend Mopar ATF+4 Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years
regardless of mileage.
Power Steering Reservoir Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting FCA
Material Standard MS-11655.
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
334 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 335
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals, and replace
if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake pads, replace as
necessary.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
XXX X X X X
Replace Brake Fluid every two
years. *
XXX X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
XX
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
XX
336 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve
if necessary.
X
* The brake fluid change interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 337
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................340
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............340
▫ Prepare A List .........................340
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............340
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................340
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center ............341
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........341
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................341
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........341
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ..............342
▫ Service Contract .......................342
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............343
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................343
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............343
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................343
▫ In Canada ............................344
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............344
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..........345
▫ Treadwear ............................345
▫ Traction Grades ........................345
▫ Temperature Grades .....................346
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
340 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 341
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
342 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 343
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
344 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 345
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
346 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............302
Adding Fuel ..............................234
Adding Washer Fluid........................299
Additives, Fuel ............................232
AirBag ..................................34
Air Bag Operation .........................35
Enhanced Accident Response ................283
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................283
If A Deployment Occurs ....................40
Knee Impact Bolsters .......................36
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............43
Transporting Pets .........................51
Air Bag Light ...........................54, 107
Air Bag Maintenance .........................43
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......293
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................296
Air Conditioning Filter ...................170, 297
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............169, 171
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...............296, 297
Air Conditioning System .....................296
Air Pressure, Tires ..........................216
Alarm (Security Alarm) .......................14
Alarm System (Security Alarm) .................14
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................301, 329
Disposal ...............................303
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................197
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................122
Appearance Care...........................307
Assist, Hill Start ...........................203
Auto Down Power Windows ...................20
Automatic Door Locks........................19
Automatic Transaxle .........................11
Automatic Transmission ..................183, 307
Adding Fluid ...........................307
Fluid And Filter Changes ...................307
Fluid Change ...........................307
Fluid Level Check ........................307
Fluid Type ..........................306,
332
Gear Ranges ............................186
Special Additives .........................306
Battery...............................108, 296
Charging System Light ....................108
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................16
Belts, Seat.................................53
Body Builders Guide..........................6
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................299
B-Pillar Location ...........................210
Brake Assist System .........................199
348 INDEX
Brake Control System, Electronic................197
Brake Fluid ...............................332
Brake, Parking.............................196
Brake System ..........................197, 305
Anti-Lock (ABS) .........................197
Fluid Check ............................305
Parking ...............................196
Warning Light ...........................112
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................185
Bulb Replacement .......................322, 324
Bulbs, Light ............................56, 322
Camera, Rear ..............................92
Capacities, Fluid ...........................329
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..................................234
Power Steering ..........................195
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................303
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................53, 233
Cargo Light ...............................81
Car Washes...............................308
Cellular Phone ............................163
Certification Label ..........................235
Chains, Tire ..............................224
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................206
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .289
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................52
Checks, Safety .............................52
Child Restraint .............................45
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................48
Child Restraints ..........................45
Infants And Child Restraints .................46
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........47
Clean Air Gasoline .........................230
Cleaning
Wheels ................................309
Climate Control............................164
Cold Weather Operation......................182
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................162
Compact Spare Tire .........................220
Console,
Overhead ..........................94
Contract, Service ...........................342
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap).............303
Cooling System ............................300
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................302
Coolant Capacity .........................329
Coolant Level ........................300, 303
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................303
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................300
10
INDEX 349
Inspection ..............................303
Points To Remember ......................304
Pressure Cap ............................303
Radiator Cap ...........................303
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......301, 329, 330
Corrosion Protection ........................307
Cruise Light ..............................124
Cupholders ............................97, 313
Customer Assistance ........................340
Customer Programmable Features...............149
Dealer Service .............................290
Defroster, Windshield ........................54
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................288
Dimmer Control ............................77
Dimmer Switch, Headlight.....................79
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ....................307
Oil (Engine) ............................291
Power Steering ..........................195
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................281
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................303
Door Ajar ................................108
Door Ajar Light............................108
Door Locks................................17
Door Locks, Automatic .......................19
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..........................193
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................61
Electronic Brake Control System ................197
Brake Assist System .......................199
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..........84
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............200
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........109
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................279
Jump Starting ...........................275
Emission Control System Maintenance............289
Engine
Air Cleaner .............................293
Block
Heater ............................183
Break-In Recommendations ..................52
Checking Oil Level .......................291
Compartment ...........................287
Compartment Identification .................287
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................300, 330
Cooling ...............................300
350 INDEX
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................53, 233
Fails To Start ............................182
Flooded, Starting .........................182
Fuel Requirements ....................230, 329
Jump Starting ...........................275
Oil ............................291, 329, 330
Oil Filter ...............................293
Oil Selection .........................292, 329
Oil Synthetic ............................293
Overheating ............................250
Starting ...............................182
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................292
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................292
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............283
Entry System, Illuminated .....................15
Ethanol..................................231
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................53, 233
Exhaust System .........................53, 294
Exterior Lighting............................77
Exterior Lights .............................56
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................293
Air Conditioning .....................170, 297
Engine Oil ..........................293, 330
Engine Oil Disposal .......................293
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................250
Turn Signal ..........................56, 123
Flooded Engine Starting ......................182
Fluid Capacities............................329
Fluid Leaks ...............................56
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ....................307
Brake .................................305
Cooling System ..........................300
Power Steering ..........................195
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ............330
Fog Lights ................................78
Four
-Way Hazard Flasher.....................250
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................279
Fuel ....................................230
Adding ...............................234
Additives ..............................232
Clean Air ..............................230
Ethanol ...............................231
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................234
Gasoline ...............................230
Materials Added .........................232
Methanol ..............................231
10
INDEX 351
Octane Rating ........................230, 330
Requirements ........................230, 329
Tank Capacity ...........................329
Fueling..................................234
Fuses ...................................313
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ..............234, 235, 289
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................230
Gasoline (Fuel) ............................230
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................230
Gear Ranges ..............................186
Gear Select Lever Override....................280
General Information .....................163, 230
Glass Cleaning ............................312
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................236, 238
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...............236, 237
Guide, Body Builders .........................6
GVWR ..................................236
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..........................193
Hazard Warning Flasher......................250
Headlights
Cleaning ...............................311
High Beam ..............................79
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........79
Passing ................................79
Switch .................................77
Head Restraints ............................72
Heated Mirrors .............................61
Heated Seats...............................71
Heater, Engine Block ........................183
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ......79
Hill Start Assist ............................203
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................240
Hood Release ..............................74
Ignition ..................................11
Key ...................................11
Ignition Key Removal ........................11
Illuminated Entry ...........................15
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................13
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................60
Instrument Cluster ......................104, 123
Instr
ument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display ..................125
Instrument Panel And Controls.................103
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................312
352 INDEX
Interior Appearance Care .....................311
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............82
Introduction ................................4
Jump Starting .............................275
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....16
Key-In Reminder............................12
Key, Replacement ...........................13
Keys ....................................11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)......................13
Lane Change Assist ..........................79
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..........................23
Latches ..................................56
Lead Free Gasoline .........................230
Leaks, Fluid ...............................56
Life Of Tires ..............................223
Light Bulbs ............................56, 322
Lights .................................56, 76
AirBag .............................54, 107
Brake Assist Warning ......................202
Brake Warning ..........................112
Bulb Replacement ........................324
Cruise ................................124
Daytime Running .........................78
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................76, 79
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator ......202
Exterior ................................56
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................250
Headlights ..............................77
High Beam ..............................79
Illuminated Entry .........................15
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........120
Park ...............................79, 124
Passing ................................79
Seat Belt Reminder .......................107
Service ................................324
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............116
Traction Control .........................202
Turn Signal ........................56, 76, 123
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .......123
Loading Vehicle ........................235, 237
Capacities ..............................237
T
ires..................................210
Locks
Automatic Door ..........................19
Door ..................................17
Lubrication, Body ..........................299
10
INDEX 353
Lug Nuts ................................251
Maintenance Free Battery .....................296
Maintenance Procedures......................290
Maintenance Schedule .......................334
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .120, 289
Manual, Service............................344
Methanol ................................231
Mirrors ..................................60
Electric Remote ...........................61
Exterior Folding ..........................60
Heated .................................61
Outside ................................60
Rearview ...............................60
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................226
Mopar Parts ...........................290, 343
MTBE/ETBE ..............................231
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................76
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...................52
Occupant Restraints .........................20
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .................230
Oil Change Indicator ........................129
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...................129
Oil, Engine............................291, 330
Capacity ...............................329
Change Interval .........................291
Checking ..............................291
Disposal ...............................293
Filter ..............................293, 330
Filter Disposal ...........................293
Identification Logo .......................292
Materials Added To .......................293
Pressure Warning Light ....................114
Recommendation .....................292, 329
Synthetic ..............................293
Viscosity ...........................292, 329
Oil Filter, Change ..........................293
Oil Filter, Selection..........................293
Oil
Pressure Light ..........................114
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................288
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................60
Overhead Console...........................94
Overheating, Engine ........................250
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........4,344
Paint Care................................307
354 INDEX
Parking Brake .............................196
ParkSense System, Rear .......................87
Passing Light ..............................79
Personal Settings ...........................149
Pets .....................................51
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........210, 211
Power
Mirrors ................................61
Steering ............................194, 195
Windows ...............................19
Power Steering Fluid ........................332
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................29
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...............................30
Radial Ply Tires ............................217
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............303
Radio Frequency
General Information .......................17
Radio Operation ...........................163
Radio (Sound Systems) ......................149
Rear Camera...............................92
Rear ParkSense System .......................87
Rearview Mirrors ...........................60
Recreational Towing.........................247
Reformulated Gasoline.......................230
Refrigerant ...............................297
Reminder, Seat Belt ..........................22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls...........162
Replacement Bulbs .........................322
Replacement Keys ...........................13
Replacement Parts ..........................290
Replacement Tires ..........................223
Reporting Safety Defects .....................343
Restraint, Head.............................72
Restraints, Child ............................45
Rotation, Tires.............................225
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................53
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................56
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................343
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..........................53
Safety Information, Tire ......................204
Safety Tips ................................52
Schedule, Maintenance.......................334
Seat
Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .......28
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............30
Energy Management Feature .................30
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................26
10
INDEX 355
Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................23
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................27
Pregnant Women .........................29
Seat Belt Pretensioner ......................30
Seat Belt Reminder ........................22
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................312
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................22
Seat Belts ..............................22, 53
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ....................28
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..........28
Child Restraint ...........................45
Front Seat .........................22, 23, 26
Inspection ..............................53
Operating Instructions ......................26
Pregnant Women .........................29
Pretensioners ............................30
Rear Seat ...............................23
Reminder ..............................107
Untwisting Procedure ......................27
Seats ....................................64
Adjustment .............................64
Heated .................................71
Security Alarm .............................14
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............330
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................13
Service Assistance ..........................340
Service Contract ...........................342
Service Manuals ...........................344
Shift Lever Override ........................280
Shoulder Belts .............................23
Signals, Turn ...........................56, 123
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................224
Snow Tires ...............................218
Spare Tire .........................219, 220, 221
Spark Plugs ..............................330
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............................87
Speed Control (Cruise Control)..................84
Starting .................................182
Automatic Transmission ....................182
Cold Weather ...........................182
Engine Fails To Start ......................182
Steering
Column
Lock ............................83
Power .............................194, 195
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................162
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .162
Storage ..................................322
Storage, Vehicle ........................170, 322
Storing Your Vehicle ........................322
356 INDEX
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag...........34
Sway Control, Trailer ........................202
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................293
Telescoping Steering Column ...................83
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........210, 211
Tire Markings .............................204
Tires...........................56, 215, 219, 345
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................223
Air Pressure .........................210, 215
Chains ................................224
Compact Spare ..........................220
General Information ...................215, 219
High Speed .............................217
Inflation Pressures ........................216
Life Of Tires ............................223
Load Capacity .......................210, 212
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .............226
Pressure Warning Light ....................116
Quality Grading .........................345
Radial ................................217
Replacement ............................223
Rotation ...............................225
Safety .............................204, 215
Sizes .................................206
Snow Tires .............................218
Spare Tire ..........................219, 221
Spinning ...............................222
Trailer Towing ...........................243
Tread Wear Indicators .....................222
Tire Safety Information.......................204
Tire Service Kit............252, 253, 254, 256, 258, 259
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................241
Torque Converter Clutch .....................192
Towing ..............................237, 281
Disabled Vehicle .........................281
Guide .................................240
Recr
eational ............................247
Weight ................................240
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ............247
Traction ..............................192, 193
Traction Control ...........................198
Traction Control Switch ......................198
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ....................202
Trailer Towing.............................237
Cooling System Tips ......................246
Hitches ................................240
Minimum Requirements ....................241
Tips ..................................246
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................241
10
INDEX 357
Wiring ................................244
Trailer Towing Guide ........................240
Trailer Weight .............................240
Transaxle
Automatic ..............................11
Transmission
Automatic .............................183
Fluid ..............................306, 332
Transporting Pets ...........................51
Tread Wear Indicators .......................222
Turn Signals ..............................123
Uconnect
Operation ..............................149
Uconnect Voice Command ....................172
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................345
Unleaded Gasoline .........................230
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................27
Vehicle Certification Label ....................235
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............7
Vehicle Loading .....................212, 235, 237
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................7
Vehicle Storage .........................170, 322
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................292
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................172
Warnings And Cautions .......................6
Warranty Information .......................343
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................299
Washing Vehicle ...........................308
Water
Driving Through .........................193
Wheel And Wheel Trim ......................309
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................309
Wind Buffeting .............................20
Window Fogging...........................170
Windows .................................19
Power .................................19
Windshield Defroster.........................54
Windshield Washers ......................82, 299
Fluid ..................................82
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................299
W
indshield Wipers ..........................82
Wiper Blade Replacement.....................299
Wipers, Intermittent .........................82
358 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2017 promaster
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
17VF-126-AE
promaster
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
